2009 Saturn AURA Green Line Hybrid Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
{ CAUTION:
To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the
Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this
happen.”
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
. : Fuel Gage
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
+ : Fuses
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
} : Power
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Front Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the seat:
Power Seats
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
On vehicles with this
feature, the handle is
located on the outboard
side of the seat.
On vehicles with heated
front seats, the buttons are
located on the outboard
side of the driver’s and front
passenger seats.
Move the handle up or down repeatedly to decrease or
increase lumbar support.
Press the top of the switch to turn the feature on. The
seat will heat to the high setting. The indicator light
above the switch will be lit next to the number 2.
Press the top of the switch again to go to the low heat
setting. The indicator light will be lit next to the
number 1.
Press the bottom of the switch to turn the feature off.
The heated seat feature will turn off when the ignition is
turned off.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ CAUTION:
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position:
Power Reclining Seatbacks
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback returns to the upright
position.
2. Release the lever to lock the seatback.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control
used to recline them is located on the outboard side
of the seat behind the power seat control.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the restraint up to
raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the
Head Restraints
button, located on the top
of the seatback, and
push the restraint down.
The rear seat head rests are also adjustable.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lift Seat
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
With this feature, either side of the seatback can be
folded down for more cargo space.
Before folding a seatback, make sure the front seat is
not reclined. If it is, the rear seatback will not fold down
all the way.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
To adjust a power lift seat, press the top or bottom of
the power lift seat switch to raise or lower the seat.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
{ CAUTION:
To lower the rear seatback, pull up on the seatback
strap while folding the seatback down. This allows
access to the trunk.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
To raise the rear seatback pull the seatback up and
make sure it latches. Push and pull on the seatback to
be sure it is locked in position. Make sure that the
safety belts are properly stowed over the seatback in all
three positions.
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the
upright locked position.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And
you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, just let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the
right front seating position may affect the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-65 for more information.
Position the release button on the buckle so that the
safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instruction on use and important safety
information.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide the
latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the
safety belt is not in use. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop
on the side wall.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners
can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off of the
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the height
adjuster and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash,
they will need to be replaced, and probably other new
parts for the vehicle’s safety belt system. See Replacing
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to
make sure it has locked into position.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Pull the guide upward to
expose its storage clip, and then slide the guide onto
the clip. Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them in
between the seatback and the interior body, leaving
only the loop of the elastic cord exposed.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It
should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• If you have the choice, a child should sit in a
position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{ CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every time infants and
young children ride in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other
people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
{ CAUTION:
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{ CAUTION:
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in the vehicle — even when no child is in it.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{ CAUTION:
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
{ CAUTION:
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
additional information.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
A. Occupant prohibited
B. Child restraint
using LATCH
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when
no child is in it.
A. Child restraint
using LATCH
B. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
If you secure a child restraint in the left or center rear
seat using LATCH, review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the child restraint, you
may not be able to access certain safety belt assemblies
or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child
restraints.
C. Child restraint using
safety belt or LATCH
or occupant using
safety belt
Configurations for Use of
Child Restraints
A. Child restraint
using LATCH
B. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
B. Child restraint
using LATCH
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for
use with or without the top tether being attached. Others
require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Rear Seat
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors, each rear
anchor position has a label, near the crease between the
seatback and the seat cushion, showing where the
anchors are located.
The top tether anchors are located behind the rear seat
on the filler panel.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with the child
restraint and the instructions in this manual.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You cannot secure three child restraints using the LATCH
anchors in the rear seat at the same time, but you can
install two of them. If you want to do this, install one
LATCH child restraint in the passenger-side position, and
install the other one either in the driver-side position or in
the center position. Refer to the following illustration to
learn which anchors to use.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in
page 1-40. Depending on where you place the child
restraint, you may not be able to access certain safety
belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional
passengers or child restraints.
A. Passenger Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors
C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper
anchor location.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system is designed to make installation of child
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use
the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’s
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to the child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. If the position you are using has an
adjustable headrest or head restraint, raise it.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether under the
headrest or head restraint
and in between the
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
study the instructions that came with the child restraint to
make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 1-8.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-42 for how and where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the
vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see
on page 1-42 for top tether anchor locations.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether
route the tether under the
headrest or head restraint
and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 1-8.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in
the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42
for more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety
belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{ CAUTION:
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing
important safety information.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
additional information.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers
locations.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator
on the passenger airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
page 1-65 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
{ CAUTION:
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest to
the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail
airbags.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are not
intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
should have inflated simply because of the damage to a
vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For
frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the vehicle
hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle
slows down. For seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail
airbags, deployment is determined by the location and
severity of the side impact.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing
the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The
inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant seating positions.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
{ CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for
some time after they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have breathing problems but cannot get out of the
vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by
opening a window or a door. If you experience
breathing problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the
hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and
turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
are visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from
a distance, you may not see the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON
or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system turns off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver
airbags and the roof-rail airbags are not affected by the
passenger sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.
Secure the rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag if:
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbags are active.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
• The system determines that an infant is present
in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbags are off. See Passenger
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in
the right front passenger seat.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to
make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing
the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-8.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
If the on indicator is still lit with an infant present in
a child restraint, secure the child restraint in a
rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your
dealer/retailer.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-15.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
{ CAUTION:
equipment except when approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
modifications that can affect how the system operates.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag system.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-28 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For
the location of the airbag modules, see What
dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, check the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
not being used at the time of the crash.
{ CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
page 7-7.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to operate the remote start feature.
information.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. The interior lamps
turn off after all of the doors are closed. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the remote
lock feedback can be programmed to have the horn chirp
and/or the turn signals flash to confirm locking. See
“LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Pressing Q may also arm the content theft-deterrent
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
Press K again within five seconds to unlock all
remaining doors. The interior lamps turn on and stay
on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the remote unlock feedback
can be programmed to have the horn chirp and/or
the turn signals flash to confirm unlocking. See
“UNLOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC
information.
With Remote Start
Shown, Without Remote
Start Similar
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The high-beam headlamps, parking lamps, and
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
back-up lamps may come on each time K is pressed.
See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter is
programmed. Each vehicle can have up to four
transmitters programmed to it.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the
content theft-deterrent system. See Content
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for
about one second to unlock the trunk. The trunk can be
opened with the transmitter when the vehicle speed
is less than 2 mph (3 km/h) or when the ignition is off.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The horn sounds three times
and the headlamps and turn signals flash three times.
Press and hold L for about three seconds to initiate the
panic alarm. The horn sounds and the headlamps and
turn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press L again to
cancel the panic alarm.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATT
page 3-44 for additional information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger. When the remote
start system is active and the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system, it will automatically regulate
the inside temperature. Normal operation of these
systems will return after the ignition key is turned to
ON/RUN.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button for about four seconds or
until the vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash.
The doors will lock.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on
and remain on while the engine is running.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine
running time, or one start with a time extension.
The first start must expire or be canceled to get
two separate 10 minute starts.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is still
running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes
from the time you repeat the steps for remote starting.
The remote start running time can be extended one time
and only after the first remote start.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
information.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the
vehicle’s key is inserted into the ignition switch and
turned to ON/RUN.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:
• The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following.
• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
• The vehicle’s hood is open.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and release the remote start button.
• The hazard warning flashers are on.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position
and then back to LOCK/OFF.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
The parking lamps turn off to indicate the engine is off.
After the engine has been started two times, or one
time with a time extension, the vehicle’s ignition must be
turned to ON/RUN using the key before the remote
start procedure can be used again. See Ignition
ignition positions on your vehicle.
• Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a time
extension, have already been provided for that
ignition cycle.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote start system
enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled
through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC
information.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
Doors and Locks
To lock or unlock the door from the outside, use the
key in the driver or front passenger door or press
the lock or unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one.
Door Locks
To lock a door from the inside, push the manual lock
knob down or use the power door lock switches.
{ CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
driver’s and front passenger’s door.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors whenever
you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
Press the outboard side of the switch to unlock all
doors. Press the inboard side of the switch to lock
all doors.
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.
Rear seat passengers must use the manual lock
knob on their doors.
Door Ajar Reminder
A chime will sound and the DOOR AJAR message will
display if one of the doors is not fully closed. This
happens when the ignition is on and the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park) or N (Neutral). See DIC Warnings
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This feature is turned on at the factory but may be
turned off through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Delayed Locking
This feature allows the driver to delay the locking of the
vehicle. It will not operate with the key in the ignition.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Press the driver power door lock switch or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock button once.
With the key removed from the ignition and the driver
door open, the following occurs:
The vehicle is programmed to lock all doors
automatically when the following are met:
• Three chimes sound to signal the delay.
• All doors are closed.
• All doors will lock and the turn signals flash once
five seconds after the last door has been closed.
• The ignition is on.
• The vehicle is shifted out of (P) Park.
This feature cannot be disabled.
• The horn chirps if the horn chirp feature is enabled.
All doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into
(P) Park.
If a door is opened before the five seconds has elapsed,
the doors do not lock until five seconds after all doors
are closed.
The power door unlock function can be programmed
through prompts displayed on the Driver Information
page 3-48.
If the power door lock switch or the transmitter lock
button is pressed twice when leaving the vehicle, the
doors lock immediately.
If the power door unlock switch or the transmitter unlock
button is pressed, the doors unlock immediately and
do not lock automatically after the doors are closed.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use these locks:
Rear Door Security Locks
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so
the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
Rear door security locks prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security locks are located on the inside
edge of each rear door. The rear doors must be opened
to access them.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
To open a rear door when the security lock is on,
do the following:
To assist in finding the lock, the vehicle will have one of
the following:
1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one,
the power door lock switch, or by lifting the rear door
manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout Protection
{ CAUTION:
This feature prevents the driver door from being locked
using the power door locks, if the key is left in the
ignition and a door is open.
Exhaust gases may enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Press the power door lock switch to lock all the doors
and then unlock the driver door.
Press and hold the power door lock switch for more
than three seconds to override this feature.
If the key is removed from the ignition, or if the manual
door lock or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is used, the key could still be locked inside
the vehicle. Always remember to take the key with you.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
Trunk
To open the trunk from the outside, press the trunk
release button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
On vehicles with this
feature, press the button
located on the driver’s door
near the map pocket to
open the trunk.
The trunk can only be opened while the vehicle is
in P (Park).
To close the trunk use the pullstrap located on the
trunk lid.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch.
This handle glows following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle up to open the trunk from the inside.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Up Window
Power Windows
On windows with this feature, pull the switch up to the
second position and release the switch to activate
the express-up feature. To stop the window as it is going
up, pull up or press down briefly on the switch again.
The power window
switches are located on
the armrest on the driver’s
door. In addition, there
is a switch on each
passenger door.
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, the driver power window
will need to be re-programmed for the express-up
feature to work. Replace or recharge the vehicle’s
battery before reprogramming.
To program the driver window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
close all doors.
Express-Down Window
The driver window has an express-down feature. This
switch is labeled AUTO. Press the front all the way down
and release, to automatically lower.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front of
the switch momentarily. To raise the window, pull
and hold the front of the switch.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is
fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely
closed.
The window is now reprogrammed.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position. The window
rises for as long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window stops at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window returns
to normal operation once the obstruction or condition
is removed.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
Window Lockout
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
The driver power window controls also include a lockout
button.
o (Window Lockout): Press the lockout button to
stop the rear passengers from using their window
switches. The driver and front passenger can still
operate all the windows with the lock on. When the red
part of the switch is visible, you have returned to
normal window operation.
{ CAUTION:
If express override is activated, the window will not
reverse automatically. You or others could be
injured and the window could be damaged. Before
you use express override, make sure that all people
and obstructions are clear of the window path.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arming the System
Sun Visors
With the ignition off, press the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter lock button to arm the system.
To block out glare, swing down the visors. They can
also be removed from the center mount and swung to
the side, to block out glare from the side. The visors
also have extenders that can be pulled out.
The system will arm 30 seconds after all the doors are
closed, or 60 seconds with any door open.
The vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors
located on the passenger and driver side visors. A light
turns on when the cover is lifted.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
time while all the doors are closed, the system will
arm immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds
if a door is open. When the open door is closed, the
system will arm.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, comes on to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light
flashes once every three seconds.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
Content Theft-Deterrent
If the system is armed and the key is used to unlock the
vehicle, the alarm will be activated.
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
If you do not want to arm the content theft system, lock
the vehicle with the manual lock knob on the doors
or with the inside power door lock switches.
The alarm will sound and the exterior lights will flash if
any door is opened while armed.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disarming the System
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To disarm the system, do one of the following:
• Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.
• Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
To turn off the system alarm:
• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
The system will then re-arm itself.
• Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
This will also disarm the system.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stop
flashing.
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This will
also disarm the system.
How the System Alarm is Activated
To activate the system if it is armed:
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
• Open the driver’s door or trunk. A ten second
pre-alarm chirp will sound followed by a
thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.
If three chirps are heard when the unlock or lock button
is pressed on the RKE transmitter, it means that the
content theft security system alarm was previously
triggered.
• Open any other door. A full alarm of horn and lights
will immediately sound for thirty seconds.
• Open the hood. If the vehicle has the remote start
feature, it will activate the full alarm.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light on the instrument panel
cluster comes on, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
page 5-83. If the engine still does not start with the other
key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start,
the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who
can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed to the system.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or damaged, see your
dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
To program the new key:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Positions
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal must be
applied.
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission. The key can only be removed
in LOCK/OFF.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
to LOCK/OFF.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof (if equipped)
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to
left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
If this doesn’t work, the vehicle needs service.
These features continue to work up to 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you use
things like the radio and windshield wipers while
the engine is not running.
The power windows, heated seats, and sunroof will
work until any door is opened.
R (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel warning lights. The switch will stay in this position
while the engine is running.
The radio continues to work until the driver’s door is
opened.
All these features operate when the key is in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle
if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
Starting the Engine
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop)
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to the ON/RUN position for driving.
The shift lever must be in P (Park) or N (Neutral) for the
vehicle to start. To restart the engine when the vehicle
is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key
in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do
the same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine. Do not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the engine and
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed goes down as your engine
gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects components. If the key is
turned to the START position, and then released
when the engine begins cranking, the engine
continues cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and
the key is held in START, cranking stops after
15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
position.
transmission gently until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle has an automatic engine start/stop feature.
After the engine is started and has reached operating
temperature, the AUTO STOP feature may cause
the engine to turn off when you apply the brakes and
come to a complete stop. When you take your foot
off the brake pedal or press the accelerator pedal, the
engine will start. The engine will continue to run until the
next AUTO STOP.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
{ CAUTION:
Exiting the vehicle, without first shifting into
P (Park), may cause the vehicle to move, you or
others may be injured. Because the vehicle has
the Automatic Engine Start/Stop feature, the
vehicle’s engine might seem to be shut off,
however, once the brake pedal is released, the
engine will start up again.
The AUTO STOP symbol on the tachometer signifies
that the engine is in AUTO STOP mode. See Auto Stop
vehicle is turned off, the tachometer will move to OFF.
If the driver door is opened while in AUTO STOP mode,
a chime will sound.
Shift to P (Park) and turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF, before exiting the vehicle.
To restart the engine during the AUTO STOP, release
the brake pedal or press the accelerator pedal.
The engine starts immediately. The vehicle continues
to run until the next stop.
There are several conditions which may prevent an
AUTO STOP or cause an AUTO START.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Engine Will Remain Running When:
The Engine Will Restart When:
• The brake pedal is released.
• The engine, transmission, or hybrid battery is
not warmed up yet.
• The accelerator pedal is applied.
• The outside temperature is less than 5°F (−15°C).
• When shifting out of D (Drive) to any other gear.
• While the A/C is in Normal Mode.
• If the Hybrid A/C button is selected, the duration of
the AUTO STOP will depend on the outside
temperature. This economy mode improves fuel
economy by limiting the effects of the air
conditioning. The warmer it is outside, the shorter
the time before the engine is restarted to provide
cabin cooling.
• A/C is in Hybrid Mode and the climate control
system is working to cool the vehicle. See Automatic
information.
• Defrost is selected.
• The shift lever is in P (Park), N (Neutral),
R (Reverse), I (Intermediate) or L (Low).
• The climate control system is turned from Off to
Normal A/C or defrost See Automatic Climate
• The hybrid battery pack charge is low.
• The 12V vehicle battery charge is low, or loads
are high.
• The engine is required to run for either heater
or climate control performance. See “Air
Conditioning Engine Start/Stop” under Automatic
information.
• The hood is not fully closed.
• The hybrid battery pack charge is low and requires
recharging.
• Auto Stop time is greater than two minutes.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{ CAUTION:
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged
in at least four hours before starting. Some models may
have an internal thermostat in the cord which will
prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The engine coolant heater cord is located near
the air cleaner box on the passenger side of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
on location.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{ CAUTION:
The shift lever is located on the console between
the seats.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
There are several different
positions for the automatic
transmission.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before starting
the engine. The vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. Fully apply the brake pedal, and
then press the shift lever button before shifting from
P (Park) when the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you
cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
lever and push the shift lever all the way into P (Park)
while maintaining brake application. Then press the shift
lever button and move the shift lever into another gear.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving with the
automatic transmission. It provides the best fuel
economy. If you need more power for passing, and
you are:
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging the transmission, see
page 4-21.
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicles is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
• Going above 35 mph (55 km/h), push the accelerator
all the way down.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without using
the brakes for slight downgrades. If constant upshifting
or downshifting occurs while driving up steep hills,
this position can be used to prevent repetitive shifts.
You might choose I (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive)
when driving on hilly, winding roads, so that there is
less shifting between gears.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
push down the parking
brake pedal with your left
foot. If the ignition is on, the
brake system warning light
will come on. See Brake
page 3-30.
The engine will not Auto Stop when the shifter is in
I (Intermediate). See Starting the Engine (Automatic
Engine Start/Stop) on page 2-22.
L (Low): This position reduces vehicle speed more
than I (Intermediate) without actually using the brakes.
Use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in L (Low), the transmission will not
shift into L (Low) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarily
on the parking brake pedal with your left foot until you
feel the pedal release. If the parking brake is not
released when you begin to drive, the brake system
warning light will be on and a chime will sound warning
you that the parking brake is still on.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a
hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will also appear in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) to remind you
to release the parking brake. See DIC Warnings and
Shifting Into Park
{ CAUTION:
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
Regenerative Braking
Regenerative braking takes some of the energy from
the moving vehicle and turns it back into electrical
energy. This energy is then stored back into the
vehicle’s hybrid battery system, contributing to increased
fuel efficiency.
1. Hold the brake pedal down, then set the parking
brake.
The system works whenever you take your foot off the
accelerator pedal while the vehicle is moving in a
forward gear. This causes the vehicle to slow down
more quickly. It may feel like the brake pedal is being
pressed, even when it is not.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pressing the
button on the shift lever while pushing the shift
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF/LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting
the transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and
then it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into P (Park). To find out how, see “Shifting Into
P (Park)” listed previously.
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is
firmly set before leaving it. After moving the shift lever into
P (Park), hold the brake pedal down. Then, see if you can
move the shift lever away from P (Park) without first
pushing the shift lever button.
If you can, the shift lever was not fully locked in P (Park).
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
Shifting Out of Park
The vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
see your dealer/retailer.
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal
is applied.
Parking Over Things That Burn
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
{ CAUTION:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{ CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information,
{ CAUTION:
Exiting the vehicle, without first shifting into
P (Park), may cause the vehicle to move, and you
or others can be seriously injured. Because the
vehicle has the Automatic Engine Start/Stop
feature, the vehicle’s engine might seem to be
shut off when you come to a complete stop.
However, once the brake pedal is released, the
vehicle can move. The vehicle’s engine can also
restart at any time.
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
Shift to P (Park) and turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF,
before exiting the vehicle.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Controls for the outside
Manual Rearview Mirror
power mirrors are located
on the inside of the
vehicle near the driver’s
side mirror.
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view behind your vehicle.
Adjust the mirror to reduce the glare of headlamps from
behind. Push the tab forward for daytime use and
pull it for nighttime use.
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom of
the mirror. See your dealer/retailer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.
about the services OnStar® provides.
Cleaning the Mirror
Use the selector switch located above the four-way
control panel to choose either the left or right outside
mirror. Then press the control pad to move the selected
mirror in the desired direction.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
To maximize the viewing area, adjust each mirror to see
the side of your vehicle and the area beside and
behind your vehicle.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, is
available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to
have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
If the vehicle has this feature, the driver side mirror
adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind you.
This feature is controlled by the automatic dimming
page 2-35 for more information.
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or
annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan is
not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
OnStar® System
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press
the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good for
60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or
a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar
advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. Press the phone button and give a few
simple voice commands to browse through the various
topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information. This feature is only available in the
continental U.S.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or
at all times.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
Cupholders
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is
red, the system may not be functioning properly.
Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar
button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.
Two removable cupholders and additional storage areas
are located at the rear of the shift lever. Push the
button and the cover will slide back automatically for
access. Slide the cover forward and lock into place
to close.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenience Net
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store
small loads as far forward as possible. The net should
not be used to store heavy loads.
Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof,
the switch is located on
the headliner between the
map lamps.
Pull down the door on the back of the center console to
use the rear seat cupholders.
Center Console Storage
The sunroof will only operate while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
There is a center console with two storage areas. Lift
the passenger side lever to access the upper storage
tray. Lift the driver side lever to access the lower
storage area.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the back of the switch and release it to open the
sunroof to the vent position. From the vent position, press
and release the back of the switch to express-open the
sunroof. To stop the sunroof from express opening, press
the switch again. If the sunshade is closed, it will open
automatically when the sunroof opens past the vented
position.
Sunshade
The automatic sunshade
control is located on the
headliner, between
the map lamp controls.
A deflector will automatically raise when the sunroof is
opened. The deflector will retract when the sunroof
is closed.
To close the sunroof, press the front of the switch and
hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if
the switch is released. Close the sunshade by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
the vehicle has an electrical failure.
The sunshade can be independently opened or closed
while the panoramic sunroof is closed. To express-open
or express-close the sunshade, press and release
the control rearward or forward. The sunshade
will retract to the full-open or closed position. To stop
the movement of the sunshade, press the control
a second time. To close the sunshade to a particular
position, continue to press the control and release
it when the desired position is reached.
Notice: If you force the sunshade forward of the
sliding glass panel, damage will occur and the
sunroof may not open or close properly. Always
close the glass panel before closing the sunshade.
The sunshade cannot be opened or closed if the vehicle
has an electrical failure.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
(If Equipped).
on page 2-27.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel
A tilt and telescope wheel lets the steering wheel
be adjusted.
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press | again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull down the
lever. Then move the steering wheel up or down or
backward or forward into a comfortable position.
Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until lane change
is complete.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrows flash
rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be
burned out.
5 3: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
O : Exterior Lamp Control
Flash-to-Pass.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
Information for these features is on the pages following.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever away
from you.
This instrument panel cluster light 3 comes on if the
high beam lamps are turned on while the ignition is
in ON/RUN.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets the high-beam headlamps be used to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward you until
the high-beam headlamps come on, then release
the lever to turn them off.
Move the lever to control the windshield wipers.
9 (Off): Turns off the windshield wipers.
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): For
intermittent or speed sensitive operation. The amount of
delay time varies between wiping cycles due to the
delay setting selected or the speed of the vehicle.
As vehicle speed is increased or decreased, the wiper
interval also increases or decreases.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools. If the
motor gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away
the snow or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.
x (Delay): While the lever is in the intermittent
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with this
symbol on it up or down to select a shorter or longer
delay between wiping cycles. To the left of the
adjust band are bars, increasing in size from bottom to
top, that indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smaller
bars mean the wipers movement is less frequent.
Larger bars mean the movement is more frequent.
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for more
than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps turn on
automatically. They turn off 15 seconds after the wipers
are turned off.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.
Windshield Washer
1 (High Speed): For wiping at a high speed.
Press the button at the end of the windshield wiper
lever until the washers begin.
8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down for a single
wiping cycle. Hold it there until the windshield wipers
start; then release. The wipers stop after one wiping
cycle. Hold the lever down longer, for more wipe cycles.
{ CAUTION:
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If they become damaged, install
new blades.
When the button is released, the washers stop, but the
wipers continue to wipe about three times or resume
the previous speed.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Cruise control lets a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more be maintained without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below 25 mph (40 km/h).
{ CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the steering
wheel.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
I (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system
on and off.
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged.
But it does not need to be reset. The cruise symbol in
the instrument panel cluster also goes out indicating
cruise is no longer engaged. Once the vehicle speed is
25 mph (40 km/h) or more, briefly press the RES+.
RES+ (Resume): Press to resume a set speed and to
accelerate the speed.
SET− (Set): Press to set a speed and to decrease
the speed.
The vehicle returns to the previously set speed
and stays there.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press I to turn cruise control on. The indicator
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
light on the button comes on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
There are two ways to increase the vehicle speed while
using cruise control:
3. Press the SET− and release it. The cruise symbol
displays in the instrument panel cluster to show the
system is engaged.
• If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press and hold the RES+ button until the desired
speed is reached, then release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
• To increase the vehicle speed in small amounts,
briefly press the RES+ and then release it.
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control automatically disengages. See Traction
conditions allow, the cruise control can be used again.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle at a lower
speed. When the brakes are applied this ends the cruise
control.
If the cruise control system is already engaged:
• Press and hold the SET− until the desired lower
speed is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly push
the SET−. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Ending Cruise Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to disengage the cruise control:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the previously set cruise
control speed.
• Step lightly on the brake pedal; when cruise control
disengages, the cruise symbol in the instrument
panel cluster goes out.
• Press the I button, to turn off the cruise control
system.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Automatically
turns on the Daytime Running Lamps during daytime,
and the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps
at night.
Headlamps
P (Off/On): Turn the band to this position to turn on
the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, this
position only works when a vehicle is in the P (Park)
position.
To turn on the Automatic Headlamp System, turn the
switch to off/on. To turn them off, turn the switch to off/on
again. This is a momentary control switch that springs
back when released. The Automatic Headlamp System
always turns on at the beginning of an ignition cycle.
The band on the lever on the outboard side of the
steering column operates the exterior lamps.
Headlamps on Reminder
The exterior lamp control has the following four positions:
If the driver’s door is opened and the ignition is turned
off while leaving the lamps on, a warning chime will
sound.
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, parking
lamps, and taillamps.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps and
taillamps only.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps Off in Park
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This feature works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and it is dark outside. To turn the headlamps
off when it is dark outside but keep other exterior lights
on, turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp
position.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada. The vehicle has a light sensor
on top of the instrument panel that controls the DRL.
Do not cover this sensor or the head lamps will be
on when they are not needed.
To turn on the headlamps along with the other lamps
when it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamp control to
the AUTO or headlamp position.
The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps come
on at a reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
This function does not work for vehicles first sold in
Canada.
• The ignition is on.
Delayed Headlamps
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The exterior lamps control is in the parking lamps
only position (This applies only to vehicles that
are first sold in Canada).
The delayed headlamps feature keeps the headlamps
on for 20 seconds after the key is turned to LOCK/OFF,
then the headlamps automatically turn off.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
To override the 20 second delayed headlamp feature
while it is active turn the turn signal/multifunction
lever up one position and then back to AUTO.
• The parking brake is released or the vehicle is not
in P (Park).
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lights
are not on unless you turn the exterior lamps control to
the parking lamp position.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when they are needed.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
off, turn the ignition on and set the exterior light
switch to the off/on position. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, the transmission must stay in P (Park) for
this function.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp
system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness
along with other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker,
parking lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radio
lights will also be dim.
The regular headlamps should be used when needed.
The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument
panel that controls the automatic headlamp system.
Do not cover the sensor or the automatic headlamp
system will turn on when it is not needed.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The knob with this
symbol is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering column.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the DRL and the automatic
headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or
bright overhead street lights does not affect the system.
The DRL and automatic headlamp systems will only
be affected when the light sensor sees a change
in lighting lasting longer than this delay.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten
or dim the lights.
If vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if
it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright
Turn the knob completely clockwise to turn on the
interior lamps.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamps
Reading Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
For vehicles with front and rear reading lamps, press
the lens to turn the lamp on and off, while the doors are
closed. These lamps come on automatically when any
door is opened.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened
or closed.
Trunk Lamp
The trunk lamp comes on when the trunk is opened and
turns off when the trunk is closed.
Entry/Exit Lighting
Electric Power Management
The lamps inside the vehicle come on when any door is
opened. These lamps fade out about 20 seconds after
all of the doors have been closed or when the ignition
is turned to ON/RUN. They also come on when the
unlock symbol button or the horn symbol is pressed on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system transmitter.
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move
up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about
20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition
to provide light as you exit.
Parade Dimming
Parade dimming is a separate lighting mode that comes
on while the parking lamps are turned on during the day.
It prevents the display lights and indicator lights from
being dim, while the parking lamps are used during
the day.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that
is needed for very high electrical loads.
Battery Run-Down Protection
The battery run-down feature is designed to protect the
vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading lamps, or dome
lamp) is left on when the ignition is turned off, the
battery run-down protection system automatically shuts
the lamp off after 20 minutes. This prevents draining
of the battery.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the following:
• Open any door.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
• Press any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
button.
• Press the power door lock switch.
• Press the remote trunk release.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to
the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or
LOW BATTERY. If this message is displayed, it is
recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads
as much as possible. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-44.
• Turn the lamp that was left on to off and then
to on again.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your retailer for additional information
on the accessory power outlet.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
There are two accessory power outlets. One accessory
power outlet is inside the center storage console and
the other is located on the center storage console below
the climate controls.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
To use an outlet, lift the protective cap. When not in
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
The accessory power outlet is operational at all times.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Control Influence on Hybrid
Operation and Fuel Economy
Climate Controls
The climate control system is dependent upon other
vehicle systems for heat and power input. Certain
climate control settings can lead to higher fuel usage
and/or fewer Auto Stops.
Automatic Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle
can be automatically controlled with this system.
The following are climate control settings that use
more fuel:
• Normal air conditioning mode.
• The defrost mode.
• Extreme temperature settings, such as
60°F (15°C) / 90°F (32°C).
• High fan speed settings.
To help reduce fuel usage:
• Use the full automatic control as described under
Automatic Operation.
• Use hybrid air conditioning, instead of the normal
air conditioning.
• Select a temperature setting that is higher in hot
weather and lower in cold weather.
A. Fan Control
B. Air Conditioning
C. Recirculation
D. Hybrid Air
E. Rear Window Defogger
F. Air Delivery Mode
Control
G. Display
Conditioning
H. Temperature Control
• Turn off the air conditioning when it is not needed.
• Only use defrost to clear the windows.
These suggestions will help to reduce fuel consumption,
but may reduce overall comfort.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Set the temperature.
Automatic Operation
An initial setting of 73°F (23°C) is recommended.
Allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate.
AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fan
speed knob and the air delivery mode knob to activate
the automatic system. When automatic operation is
active the system controls the inside temperature and
air delivery.
Press the w or x arrow temperature buttons
to adjust the temperature setting as necessary.
If the temperature is set at 60°F (15°C) the system
remains at the maximum cooling setting. If the
temperature is set at 90°F (32°C) the system
remains at the maximum heat setting. Choosing
either maximum setting does not cause the vehicle
to heat or cool any faster.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
full automatic control:
1. Turn the fan knob and the mode knob to the
AUTO position.
Do not cover the sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on the intensity
of the sun.
The current set temperature displays. When AUTO
is selected, the air conditioning operation and air
inlet is automatically controlled. The air conditioning
compressor runs while the outside temperature is
over about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet is normally
set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet can
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to
help quickly cool down the vehicle.
Also do not cover the sensor grille on the lower
right side of the climate control faceplate, as
this regulates the inside temperature.
To avoid blowing cold air at engine start-up in cold
weather, the system delays turning on the fan
until warm air is available. The length of delay
depends on the engine coolant temperature.
Turning the fan knob overrides this delay and
changes the fan to the selected speed.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some air directed to the side window outlets.
The air delivery mode or fan speed, can manually be
adjusted.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
9 (Off): Turns the fan off. Outside air still enters the
vehicle. The direction can be changed by changing
the mode position. The temperature can also be
adjusted using either the up or down arrow temperature
buttons.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the floor and windshield
outlets.
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog or
frost more quickly. The system automatically controls
the fan speed if defrost is selected from the AUTO
mode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or
warmer, the air conditioning compressor automatically
runs to help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.
The air conditioning indicator light blinks three times
if the compressor is turned off while in this mode.
9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase or decrease the
fan speed.
w x Temperature Control: Press to increase or
decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow.
To change the current mode, select one of the
following:
The engine will not perform Auto Stops when the defrost
mode is on.
# (Normal Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air
conditioning on and off. A light above the button comes
on to show that it is on.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets, with some air directed
to the side window defogger.
When air conditioning is selected or is in AUTO mode,
the system runs the air conditioning automatically to
cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While in this mode, the hybrid system does not shut the
engine down at complete stops.
Maximum Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for
the vehicle to cool down. Then keep the windows closed
for the air conditioner to work its best.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation
of the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm
air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel
1. Select the C vent mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select # air conditioning.
outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, press x or w
to the desired temperature setting.
4. Select the h recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifies the
air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode,
the system maximizes its performance by using
recirculation as necessary.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
the vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
N (Hybrid Air Conditioning): This setting balances
fuel economy and air conditioning comfort. When
hybrid A/C is used in warm weather, you may notice
more frequent auto stops and the cabin may be warmer
as compared to normal air conditioning.
Heating: On cold days when using manual operation
of the automatic system, use floor mode to deliver air to
the floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered,
press x or w to the desired temperature setting.
To use the automatic mode, turn the knob to AUTO and
adjust the temperature by pressing x or w.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the heater is in use, there might be slight noise or
vibration during Auto Stops. This is due to the coolant
circulation pump that continues to circulate heat through
the system during the engine Auto Stop.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
The heater works best if the windows are kept closed.
< (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger on
or off. An indicator light above the button comes on
to show that the rear window defogger is on.
h (Recirculation): Press to turn on the recirculation
mode. An indicator light above the button comes on
to show it is on. The recirculation mode recirculates and
helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. It can
be used to prevent outside air and odors from
entering the vehicle and for maximum air conditioning
performance in hot weather. Only use this mode when
it is needed for comfort.
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is
pressed. If additional warming time is needed, press the
button again.
If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on once
the button is pressed.
Press this button to cancel the auto recirculation
feature. Each time the vehicle is started, the system
reverts to the auto recirculation function.
If the vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the surface of
the outside mirrors also heat when the rear window
defogger is activated. See Outside Power Mirrors
on page 2-35.
If recirculation is selected while in defrost, defog or
floor mode, the light on the button flashes three times
and then goes out to indicate that this is not allowed.
This is to prevent window fogging.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the
system in recirculation for extended periods of time can
cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the
fog, select either defog or defrost. Make sure the
air conditioning is on. Allow the air conditioning to run
automatically to help dehumidify the air.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
There are four main air outlets on the instrument panel.
Move the lever located in the center of each outlet
side-to-side or up and down, to change the direction and
amount of airflow in the vehicle. The center thumbwheel
does not control the main outlets.
Rear Seat Air Outlet
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
For vehicles with this feature, the rear seat air outlet is
located in the center of the instrument panel above
the two main center outlets.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
Use the thumbwheel in the center of the outlet to turn
the airflow on or off.
Operation Tips
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that can
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
• Do not use non-GM approved hood deflectors as
they could adversely affect the performance of
the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,
how much fuel the vehicle has used, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada Similar
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has
been driven since the odometer was last reset.
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and
This vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The digital
odometer will read 999,999 if it is turned back.
Tachometer
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, it must
be set to the mileage total of the old odometer.
If that is not possible, then it must be set at zero and
a label must be put on the driver door to show the
old mileage reading when the new odometer was
installed.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
The tachometer also indicates AUTO STOP. For more
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminders
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, comes on and stays on for
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind the driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The driver safety belt light
comes on and stays on for
several seconds, then
several seconds and then flashes for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
flashes for several more.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{ CAUTION:
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
for more information.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
important safety information. The instrument panel has
a passenger airbag status indicator.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
United States
Canada
{ CAUTION:
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you
are using remote start to start the vehicle from a
distance, if equipped, you may not see the system
check. Then, after several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or
off symbol to let you know the status of the right
front passenger frontal and seat-mounted side impact
airbags.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking
both parts need to be working.
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also
for more information. This light could indicate that
there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that
there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
United States
Canada
{ CAUTION:
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the system is working
normally the indicator light will then go off.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
This light comes on briefly
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The
light stays on if the parking brake does not fully release.
If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released,
it means there is a brake problem.
while the starting the
engine.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display a
BRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warnings and
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light will then go off.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal may be harder to push or it
may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop.
Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one or two
times, if the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light still stays
on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is
not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but it does not have
antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not have antilock
brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
brake related DIC messages.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on and stays on, the TCS and
potentially the ESC system have been disabled.
Check the DIC messaging to determine which system is
turned off, or not working. If the system is not working,
the vehicle needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
The Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system or
the Traction Control
System (TCS) indicator/
warning light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
When the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is not limited.
When the ESC system is disabled, the system does not
aid in maintaining vehicle directional control.
If the light comes on and flashes, the TCS or the ESC
system is actively working. When the LOW TRACTION
message appears, the system is limiting wheel spin.
When the ESC ACTIVE message appears, the system
is aiding in maintaining vehicle directional control.
information.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light goes off.
more information on the messages associated with
this light.
This light, along with the appropriate Driver Information
Center (DIC) messages, indicates when the ESC
system and the TCS are working or are disabled.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure light, this light
comes on briefly when the
engine is started and
provides information about
tire pressures and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System.
This light indicates that
the engine coolant
has overheated or the
radiator cooling fan is
not working.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
This light comes on briefly when the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light goes off.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center
(DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and
check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so. If a tire is
page 5-42 for more information.
If the light comes on and the vehicle has been operating
under normal driving conditions, pull off the road, stop
the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
When the Light Flashes First and Then
is On Steady
This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
for more information.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
This light comes on when
the ignition is on, but the
engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working.
If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Heeding the light can prevent
more serious damage to the vehicle. This system
assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following can prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop
the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle. Turn the
key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart the engine.
If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps and
see your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may cause: stalling after
start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed into
gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or
stumbling on acceleration. These conditions might go
away once the engine is warmed up.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, have
your dealer/retailer check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Oil Pressure Light
If the vehicle has low
engine oil pressure, this
light stays on after
the engine is started, or
comes on and a chime
sounds while driving
the vehicle.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in the ON/RUN and the light is not on.
{ CAUTION:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if the battery has
recently been replaced or if the battery has run down.
The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during normal driving. This
can take several days of routine driving. If this has
been done and the vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness, your
dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This indicates that the engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
This light comes on briefly while turning on the ignition
as a check to show it is working. If it does not come
on with the ignition on, there may be a problem with the
bulb. Have it fixed right away.
Security Light
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-17.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
for more information.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
These are normal and do not indicate a problem with
the fuel gage:
Fuel Gage
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The indicator moves a little when while turning a
corner or speeding up.
United States
Canada
• The gage goes back to empty when the ignition is
turned off.
The fuel gage shows how much fuel the vehicle has left,
when the ignition is on. When the indicator nears
empty, a LOW FUEL message appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
The vehicle still has a little fuel left, but the vehicle
should be fueled soon. The arrow on the fuel gage
points to side of the vehicle with the fuel door.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Stop Mode
Charge/Assist Gage
The CHARGE/ASSIST
gage displays the charge,
into and out of the
hybrid battery.
United States
Canada
The AUTO STOP indicator on the tachometer shows that
the engine is stopped and is in the fuel saving mode.
When the ignition key is turned off, the tachometer
needle drops to the OFF indicator.
When the gage indicates ASSIST, the electric motor
assists for maximum acceleration.
If the ignition is on, the vehicle is in AUTO STOP, and
the driver’s door is opened, a chime sounds.
When the gage indicates CHARGE, the electric motor
operates as a generator to perform regenerative braking
page 2-30 for more information.
The gage also indicates CHARGE when the system is
recharging the hybrid battery.
If the hybrid battery or other hybrid components are
very hot or cold, the CHARGE and ASSIST functions
may be suspended until the component temperatures
are normal.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Economy Light
Driver Information Center (DIC)
If enabled, this light comes
on briefly when the vehicle
is started.
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver
personalization menu modes and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side of
the steering wheel.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
This light comes on to indicate the vehicle is achieving
fuel economy at or greater than its rated fuel economy.
Driving habits that improve fuel economy increase
the time that the fuel economy light is on.
This light can be disabled by using the Driver
Information Center (DIC) buttons. See DIC Vehicle
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization menu
mode setting, or acknowledge a warning message.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for one second, then release the buttons
to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer displays. This mode
shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
DIC Operation and Displays
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
page 3-48.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in
the following.
Trip Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature along with A or B displays. These modes
show the current distance traveled since the last
reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at
the same time.
Information Modes
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature
The outside air temperature will be displayed at the
same time as the Odometer and the Trip Odometer.
The temperature outside of the vehicle will be
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset button for a few seconds while the desired
trip odometer is displayed.
displayed in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees
Celsius (°C). The outside air temperature appears
on the left side of the DIC display and the odometer, or
trip odometer, appears on the right side of the display.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL RANGE
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy
at a particular moment and changes frequently as
driving conditions change. This mode shows the
instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average
fuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the remaining distance you
can drive without refueling in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank.
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
Under most coast conditions, 99 MPG (0 L/100KM)
displays which means that the electric motor/generator
is on and the engine is not using any fuel. At an idle
stop, AUTOSTOP displays which means that the electric
motor/generator is off, the gas engine is off, and the
engine is not using any fuel.
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG
displays. This mode shows how many miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your
vehicle is getting based on current and past driving
conditions.
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.
This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting from
that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, it is
continually updated each time you drive.
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OIL LIFE
Tire Pressure
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system
is reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure is shown in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
information button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays
for the front tires. Press the information button again
until LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear tires.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil
life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the tire pressure appears in the display.
information.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
COOLANT
Press the information button until COOLANT displays.
This mode shows the temperature of the engine coolant
in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAKE FLUID
DIC Warnings and Messages
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.
information. Have the brake system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle’s systems.
A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is no
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it
from the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons.
If the condition is still present, the warning message
comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned
off and back on. With most messages, a warning chime
sounds when the message displays. Your vehicle
may have other warning messages.
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed.
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from
the display, the engine oil life system must still be
more information.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.
for more information.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it
is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the message off.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.
for more information.
CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in
one or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as
soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked
and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information
page 5-48. The DIC also shows the tire pressure
If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure
page 3-33.
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine power
is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
CRUISE ENGAGED
This message displays when the cruise control system
information.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is
assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
You may feel or hear the system working and see this
message displayed in the DIC. Slippery road conditions
may exist when this message is displayed, so adjust
your driving accordingly. This message may stay on for
a few seconds after ESC stops assisting you with
directional control of the vehicle. This is normal when
the system is operating. See Electronic Stability Control
DOOR AJAR
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle’s
doors are not closed properly. Make sure that the
door(s) are closed completely.
ENGINE DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF
LOW FUEL
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when
ESC is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-32
for more information.
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
LOW TRACTION
This message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when the system
is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions
may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust
your driving accordingly. This message stays on for a
few seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin.
more information.
HOOD AJAR
This message displays if the hood is not fully closed.
Make sure that the hood is closed completely.
The vehicle will not auto stop when the hood is ajar.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
LOW WASHER FLUID
This message displays when the vehicle’s windshield
washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid
reservoir to the proper level as soon as possible.
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery in
the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under
page 2-4.
POWER STEERING
This message displays if a problem has been detected
with the electric power steering. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
back on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible.
PUSH PARK PEDAL
This message displays if the parking brake is left
information.
SERVICE HYBRID
This message displays if the hybrid components need
to be serviced. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
SERVICE TRACTION
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
system is not functioning properly. The ESC/TCS
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster.
This light stays on solid as long as the detected problem
remains present. When this message displays, the
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-32
for more information. Have the system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SERVICE ESC
(ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL)
This message displays and a chime sounds if there has
been a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster.
This light stays on solid as long as the detected problem
remains present. When this message displays, the
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-32
for more information.
SRVC (Service) HILL START
This message displays if there is a problem with the
hill start assist function. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on or turns
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
DIC Vehicle Personalization
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is
not working properly. The tire pressure light also
flashes and then remains on during the same ignition
conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire
information. If the warning comes on and stays on,
there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer/retailer.
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on your
vehicle. Only the features available will be displayed on
the DIC.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed
from their default state since that time.
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
TRACTION OFF
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
This message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the
system is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-32
for more information.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
the same time for one second, then release to enter
the personalization menu.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),
only the ECO TELLTALE menu and UNITS menu
will be accessible.
TRUNK AJAR
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
information.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
Press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings for each mode.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
LOCK HORN
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp
every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or
disabled. When LOCK HORN appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least one second
to scroll through the available settings:
Personalization Menu Modes
OIL LIFE RESET
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine
oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine Oil
information.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn
will still chirp on the second press.
UNITS
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
button on the RKE transmitter.
page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information
will be displayed in English units.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNLOCK HORN
LIGHT FLASH
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on
the first press of the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled or
disabled. When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least one second
to scroll through the available settings:
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
hazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock,
unlock, or trunk release buttons on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter are pressed, can be enabled
or disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will
not flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DELAY LOCK
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY
LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold
the reset button for at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power lock
switch or the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter a second time.
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock. You
will need to manually unlock the doors.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter.
for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNLK (Unlock)
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
This screen displays only if DRIVER or ALL is selected
for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
perimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock button
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When EXT
LIGHTS appears on the display, press and hold the
reset button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
turned off.
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LANGUAGE
ECO TELLTALE
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
This feature allows you to enable or disable the Fuel
Economy Light. When ECO TELLTALE appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
ON (default): The fuel economy light comes on when
good fuel efficient driving habits are maintained.
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.
OFF: The fuel economy light will not come on,
regardless of how fuel efficient the driving habits are.
information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization
menu mode, press the information button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Exiting Personalization Menu
The personalization menu will be exited when any of the
following conditions occur:
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
page 4-2.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
Setting the Clock
date press H while the radio is on. The date with display
times out after a few seconds and goes back to the
normal radio and time display.
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
1. Press H and then the softkey located below the
forward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H,
and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and
year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)
displays.
3. Press the softkey located below any one of the tabs
that you want to change.
4. To increase the time or date do one of the following:
• Press the softkey located below the selected tab.
2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.
• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.
• Turn f clockwise.
3. Press H again to apply the selected default, or
let the screen time out.
5. To decrease the time or date do one of the
following:
• Press ©SEEK or s REV.
• Turn f counterclockwise.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
Radio(s)
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on and
off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
the Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) feature
automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for
road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or
slows down, so that the volume level is consistent.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown,
Radio with CD (MP3) similar
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system.
Radio Data System (RDS)
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab on
the radio display.
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
The radio may have RDS. The RDS feature is available
for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works when the
information is available. While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
¨SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
signal in the selected band.
BAND: Press to choose between FM, AM, or XM™.
• To seek stations, press and release ¨SEEK to go
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
to the next station and stay there.
• To scan stations, press and hold ¨SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
©SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
signal in the selected band.
• To seek stations, press and release ©SEEK to go
goes to the next station. Press ¨SEEK again to
to the previous station and stay there.
stop scanning.
• To scan stations, press and hold ©SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
• To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
and hold ¨ SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
goes to the next station. Press ©SEEK again to
stop scanning.
stored preset. Press ¨ SEEK again to stop
• To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
scanning preset stations.
and hold ©SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
4 (Information): For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA,
or RDS features, press 4 to display additional text
information related to the current FM-RDS or XM station;
or CD, MP3, WMA song. Song title information will be
displayed on the top line of the display while the
artist information will be displayed on the bottom line, if
the information is available during XM, CD, MP3, or
WMA playback. When information is not available,
“No Info” displays.
stored preset. Press ©SEEK again to stop
scanning preset stations.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To setup the number of favorites pages:
Storing a Radio Station
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.
Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites
while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite
stations using the softkeys, favorites button, and steering
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the softkey located below the displayed
page numbers.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can
be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located
below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the
radio favorites page button (FAV button). Press FAV
to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having
six favorite stations available per page. Each page
of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or
XM stations. The current balance/fade and tone
settings are also stored with the favorite stations.
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time out, to return to
the original main radio screen showing the radio
station frequency tabs and to begin programming
favorites.
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, and
WMA features): If additional information is available
for the current song being played, Auto Text will
automatically page/scroll the information every
three seconds above the FAV presets on the
radio display.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station and set the
balance/fade and tone settings to the desired levels.
To activate Auto Text:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press FAV to display the page where to store the
station.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on the
radio display.
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep
sounds.
3. Press the softkey under the ON tab on the radio
display.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored
as a favorite.
If 4 is pressed and the song title or artist information
is longer than what can be displayed, the extra
information will page every three seconds when Auto
Text is activated.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset
equalization settings.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
To return to the manual mode, press EQ until Manual
displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,
or treble by pressing f.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
The radio may display some or all tones such as
BASS, MID, and TREB.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
To adjust the tone settings:
To adjust balance or fade:
1. Press f until the tone control tabs display.
1. Press f until the speaker control labels display.
2. Press the softkey below the desired tab, then
turn f to adjust the highlighted setting. The
highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing
either SEEK arrow, or by pressing \ FWD or
s REV.
2. Press the softkey under the desired tab, or continue
pressing f to highlight the desired tab.
3. Turn f to adjust the highlighted setting.
The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by
pressing either SEEK arrow.
The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position by pressing the
softkey below the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more
than two seconds. The radio beeps once and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
On some radios, \ FWD and s REV can also
be used to adjust the highlighted level.
The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade
to the middle position by pressing the softkey below
the BAL or FADE tab for more than two seconds.
The radio beeps once and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f
for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
If a station’s frequency is weak, or has static, decrease
the treble.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f
for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.
3. Turn f to display the category to be removed.
CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT button
feature.
To select and find a desired category:
4. Press the softkey below the Remove tab until the
category name along with the word Removed
displays.
1. Press BAND until the XM frequency displays.
2. Press CAT to display the category labels on the
radio display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove additional categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the softkey under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the softkey below the Restore
All tab.
3. Press either of the two softkeys below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first
XM station associated with that category.
4. To go to the previous or to the next XM station
within the selected category, do one of the
following:
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Radio Messages
• Turn f.
Calibration Error: Displays if the radio is no longer
calibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Loc or Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK®
system has activated. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Press the softkeys below the right or left arrows
on the radio display.
• Press ©SEEK or ¨SEEK.
5. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display the favorites again.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio Service
Ejecting a CD
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your
trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in
the vehicle. A service fee is required to receive the
XM service. For more information, contact XM at
xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Z EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
Radio Messages for XM Only
©SEEK: Press to go to the start of the current track,
if more than ten seconds have played. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving
backward through the tracks on the CD.
section for further detail.
Loading a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD begins playing.
¨SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through the tracks on the CD.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio may have the MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc
capability feature. For more information, see Using an
RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order.
CD Messages
To use random:
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
1. Press the softkey below RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays.
• The CD player is very hot. When the temperature
returns to normal, the CD should play.
2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the track number displays when a CD is in
the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, No Aux Input Device Found
may display.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• A problem may have occurred while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
Care of CDs
Store CD(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
player scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom of
a CD is damaged it may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom of a CD while handling it.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge
of the hole and the outer edge.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in this
section.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system may have an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is
not an audio output; do not plug the headphone set
into the front auxiliary input jack. An external audio
device such as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player,
CD changer, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary
input jack for use as another audio source.
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth or
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the
CD if a description is needed.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive
distraction.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the
CD player.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
Using the USB Port
Radio’s with a USB port can control a USB storage
device or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs.
about how to connect and control a USB storage device
or an iPod.
O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjust the volume.
Additional volume adjustments may have to be made
from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or
not loud.
USB Support
The USB connector is located on the front of the radio
and uses the USB 2.0 standard.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing until it is stopped or turned off.
USB Supported Devices
• USB Flash Drives
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, No Aux Input Device Found may display.
• Portable USB Hard Drives
• Fifth generation or later iPod
• First, Second, or Third generation iPod nano
• iPod touch
• iPod classic
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple®
for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated using
the latest iTunes® application. See apple.com/itunes.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB Supported File and Folder Structure
The radio supports:
Using an MP3
Format
• Up to 700 folders.
Radios that have the capability of playing MP3’s can
play .mp3 files that were recorded onto a CD-R or
CD-RW disc. Radios that have a USB port can play .mp3
and .wma files that are stored on a USB storage device
as well as AAC files that are stored on an iPod®.
• Up to 8 folders in depth.
• Up to 65,535 files.
• Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
• Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
• AAC files stored on an iPod.
• FAT16
Compressed Audio
The radio can play discs that contain both uncompressed
CD audio and MP3 files. If both formats are on the disc,
the radio reads all MP3 files first, then the uncompressed
CD audio files.
• FAT32
Root Directory
CD-R or CD-RW Supported File and
Folder Structure
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored
in the root directory when the disc or storage device
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root
directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.
The radio supports:
• Up to 50 folders.
Empty Folder
• Up to 8 folders in depth.
• Up to 50 playlists.
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.
• Up to 255 files.
• Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
• Files with an .mp3 or.cda file extension.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks are played in the following order:
CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, there is
no playlist editing capability using the radio. These
playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are
stored on a USB device may be supported by the
radio with a USB port.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently
playing.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
©SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times to continue moving backward
through tracks.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
¨SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts of words
on the last page of text and the extension of the
filename is not displayed.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume
and the elapsed time of the file displays. Release
s REV to resume playing.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files
in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown
on the second line of the display. Once all songs by that
artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the next
or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the
desired artist displays.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey below
S c to go to the first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below c T
to go to the first track in the next folder.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album:
RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on a
CD in random, rather than sequential order. To
use random, press the softkey under the RDM tab until
Random Current Disc displays to play songs from
the current CD in random order. Press the same softkey
again to turn off random play.
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab from
the sort screen.
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to
the main music navigator screen.
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below
The album name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album begins
to play. Once all songs from that album have played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order
on the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
h to have the files played in order by artist or
album. The player scans the disc to sort the files by
artist and album ID3 tag information. It can take
several minutes to scan the disc depending on the
number of files on the disc. The radio may begin playing
while it is scanning in the background.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey
below the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a USB Storage Device
or iPod®
Using the Radio to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a
USB storage device.
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song
information on the radio’s display.
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device
to the USB port located on the front of the radio.
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable
that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector
and connect the other end to the USB port located
on the front of the radio. If the vehicle is on and the USB
connection works, “OK a disconnect” and a GM logo
may appear on the iPod and iPod appears on the radio’s
display. The iPod music appears on the radio’s display
and begins playing.
©SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times to continue moving backward
through tracks.
¨SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle if
the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle’s battery.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release
s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported,
it can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) stereo cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
4 (Information): Press to display additional information
about the selected track.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Softkeys to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selected
folder.
5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to
control the functions listed below.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
To use the softkeys:
• First softkey, first item in the list.
• Second softkey, 20% through the list.
• Third softkey, 40% through the list.
• Fourth softkey, 60% through the list.
• Fifth softkey, 80% through the list.
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio display
to display the functions listed below, or press the
softkey below the function if it is currently displayed.
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function on
it to use that function.
j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the
track. The tab appears raised when pause is being used.
Press the softkey below j again to resume playback.
below h to view and select a file on an iPod,
using the iPod’s menu system. Files are sorted by:
Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back
to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root
directory on a USB storage device.
• Playlists
• Artists
c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view
the contents of the current folder on the USB drive.
To browse and select files:
• Albums
• Genres
• Songs
1. Press the softkey below c .
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of folders.
• Composers
3. Press f to select the desired folder. If there is
more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
the desired folder is reached.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select files:
' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below ' to
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when
Repeat Track is being used.
1. Press the softkey below h .
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of menus.
3. Press f to select the desired menu.
Shuffle Functionality
To use Shuffle:
4. Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the
selected menu.
Press the softkey below > , 2 , < or = to select
between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs,
Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.
5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
> (Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2 to turn
shuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB storage
device or iPod is first connected.
• First softkey, first item in the list.
• Second softkey, 20% through the list.
• Third softkey, 40% through the list.
• Fourth softkey, 60% through the list.
• Fifth softkey, 80% through the list.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press the
softkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on the
USB storage device or iPod.
< (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.
Repeat Functionality
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage
device.
To use Repeat:
Press the softkey below " or ' to select between
Repeat All and Repeat Track.
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All
is being used. This is the default mode when a
USB storage device or iPod is first connected.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Title Info: No song title information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No CAT Info: No category information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM™ receiver in your vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle.
For security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this message is received
after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
Audio System
Bluetooth®
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and over-rides the audio system. Use the audio
system volume knob, during a call, to change the
volume level. The adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a
minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to
make and receive phone calls. The system can be used
while the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position. The range of the Bluetooth system can be up
to 30 ft. (9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions,
and not all phones are guaranteed to work with the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetooth for
more information on compatible phones.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
information.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if
there is too much background noise.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing a Phone
Pairing
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
Pairing Information:
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the list
on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on
the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that
was provided in Step 3.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
Deleting a Paired Phone
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Storing Name Tags
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with “Please
say the first digit to store” followed by a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
4. After the system stores the phone number,
it responds with “Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
To use the delete command:
Using the Directory Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
Using the Dial Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar,
if present.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. “Number please” followed by a tone.
To use the delete all name tags command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
• If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re-entered.
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
Using the Digit Dial Command
Making a Call
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Calls can be made using the following commands:
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• Dial
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
• Digit Dial
• Call
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
• Re-dial
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with
“OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Using the Call Command
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Call Waiting
Ending a Call
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
Press c x to end a call.
Muting a Call
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when another
call is active. The original call is placed on hold.
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the original
call with no action.
To Mute a call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
followed by a tone.
switch to the call on hold.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
Three-Way Calling
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
the callers together.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transferring a Call
Voice Pass-Thru
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,
accessing <phone name>”.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven phone system.
Account numbers can be programmed into the
phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag to send.
Sending a Number During a Call
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
3. Say the number to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Information
Theft-Deterrent Feature
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
e + / e − (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
w / x (Next /Previous): Press to change radio
stations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks and
navigate folders on an iPod® or USB device.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change radio stations:
3. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down
the list.
• Press and release w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station stored as a preset.
• To select a folder, press and hold w when the
folder is highlighted.
• Press and hold w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station in the selected band with a
strong signal.
• To go back further in the folder list, press
and hold x .
To select tracks on a CD:
c (End): Press to reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
Press and release w or x to go to the next or
previous track.
b g (Mute / Voice Recognition): Press to silence
the vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the
sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems
press and hold b g for longer than two seconds to
information.
To select tracks on an iPod or USB device:
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down
the list, then press and hold w to play the
highlighted track.
To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device:
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
2. Press and hold x to go back to the previous
folder list.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio Service
Radio Reception
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills
can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or
standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or
tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period
of time.
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
causes an increased level of static while listening to
the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that
automatically works to reduce interference, some static
can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backglass Antenna
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged.
If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with
radio reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna
connector needs to be properly attached to the post
on the glass.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
Chime Level Adjustment
The radio may be used to adjust the vehicle’s chime
level. If the radio can be used to change the volume
level of the chime, press and hold the sixth FAV softkey
with the ignition on and the radio power off. The volume
level changes between Normal and Loud. The selected
volume level appears on the radio display.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory
radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defensive Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
{ CAUTION:
• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Focus on the task of driving.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic following distances
eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down. If
the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once
the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get
a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump or
motor might be heard operating and the brake pedal
might be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.
page 3-31.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Assist
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to assist
the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in
emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake control module to
supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down
the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control
module increases brake pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal
and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature
will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
The vehicle has an Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system which combines antilock brake, traction and
stability control systems and helps the driver maintain
directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
When you first start the vehicle and begin to drive away,
the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light will be on solid, and the ESC OFF or SERVICE
ESC message will be displayed.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system
is both on and activated.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system
begins to assist the driver maintain directional control of
the vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the
cruise control will automatically disengage. The cruise
control system may be re-engaged when road conditions
The ESC/TCS button is
located on the center
console.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this
is normal.
When the light is on solid and either the SERVICE ESC
or ESC OFF message is displayed, the system will
not assist the driver in maintaining directional control of
the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC
The traction control system can be turned off or back on
by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both traction
control and ESC, press and hold the button briefly.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started. To
assist the driver with vehicle directional control, especially
in slippery road conditions, the system should always be
left on. But, ESC can be turned off if needed.
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
OFF and ESC OFF messages will appear, and
the ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driver
that both traction control and ESC are disabled.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the
system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that the front wheels are spinning too much or are
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power by closing the throttle and managing engine
spark to limit wheel spin.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light will be
on solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and
requires service. If the problem does not clear after
restarting the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service.
more information.
This light will flash when
the traction control system
is limiting wheel spin.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but
this is normal.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control may be re-engaged when
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the
When this light is on solid
and either the SERVICE
TRACTION or TRACTION
OFF message is displayed,
the system will not limit
wheel spin.
system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle
To turn the system off or
on, press and release this
button located on the
instrument panel.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
The Traction Control System is automatically enabled
whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, always leave the
system enabled. TCS can be turned off if needed.
The DIC will display the appropriate message as
described previously when the button is pressed.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, it is
possible to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with
the front wheels spinning with a loss of traction,
it is possible to cause damage to the transmission.
Do not attempt to shift when the front wheels do
not have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the
vehicle is not covered. See your warranty book
for additional information.
Traction Control Operation
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine
power to the wheels (engine speed management)
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when the vehicle is started, and it will activate and flash
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses either of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving. For
more information on the LOW TRACTION message,
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction
in acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration
may be heard. This is normal.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle are allowed to
spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and Brake
warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or
SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed, the
differential could be damaged. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce engine
power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively while
these lights and this message are displayed.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control
may be re-engaged when road conditions allow.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Tips
Steering
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
If the engine stalls while driving, the power steering
assist system will continue to operate until you are able to
stop the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost because
the electric power steering system is not functioning, the
vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
several times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in
the stopped position for an extended amount of time, you
may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist.
The normal amount of power steering assist should return
shortly after a few normal steering movements.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems, contact your dealer/retailer for service repairs.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as possible
from a collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm,
(about one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more
limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s three
control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not
rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed
or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to
a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If the traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• When tired, pull off the road.
Driving at Night
• Do not wear sunglasses.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
• Do not drink and drive.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{ CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
on page 5-42.
• Turn off cruise control.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 4-8, it improves the ability to accelerate on slippery
roads, but slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. When driving through deep snow, turn off the
traction control system to help maintain vehicle motion at
lower speeds.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain begins
to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet
ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt
or sand.
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blizzard Conditions
CAUTION: (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the Index.
{ CAUTION:
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about
to keep warm also helps.
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
{ CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be
towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Vehicle
Certification label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label lists the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
page 5-48.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to
tow a trailer.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs
1,000 lbs
A
A
(453 kg)
(453 kg)
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s maximum vehicle
capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
A vehicle specific Certification label is found on
the rear edge of the driver’s door.
0 lbs (0 kg)
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
the front or rear axle.
{ CAUTION:
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
{ CAUTION:
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In
a trunk, put them as far forward as you
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else are put inside the vehicle, they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
• How far will the vehicle be towed? Some vehicles
have restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Does the vehicle have the proper towing
equipment? See your dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device
known as a dolly.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To dinghy tow the vehicle from the front with all
four wheels on the ground:
Dinghy Towing
When dinghy towing, the vehicle should be run at the
beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for about
five minutes. This will ensure proper lubrication of
transmission components.
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it to the
towing vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission to P (Park) and turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. To prevent the battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, remove the following
fuse from the instrument panel fuse block:
(IGN SENSOR). See Instrument Panel Fuse Block
on page 5-83 for more information.
5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
6. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
7. Release the parking brake.
Remember to reinstall the IGN SENSOR fuse once the
destination has been reached.
Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h) is exceeded while
towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing the vehicle.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Never have the vehicle towed from the rear.
Tow the vehicle with the two rear wheels on the ground
and the front wheels on a dolly.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To tow the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
a dolly:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the gear shift lever in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Remove the key from the ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Never have the vehicle towed from the rear.
Towing a Trailer
The vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow a
trailer.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine Saturn parts and Saturn-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{ CAUTION:
Never try to do your own service on hybrid
components. You can be injured and the vehicle
can be damaged if you try to do your own service
work. Service and repair of these hybrid
components should only be performed by a
trained service technician with the proper
knowledge and tools.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
{ CAUTION:
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage
and the date of any service work performed. See
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts, and
tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and metric fasteners can be
easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are
used, parts can later break or fall off. You could
be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Fuel
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
additional information.
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep
the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, the
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog-check
If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer
for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every
engine oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment
PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling the Tank
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fuel door is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in
and release and it will open.
To remove the tethered fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), the
CHECK GAS CAP message displays if the fuel cap
is not properly installed.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it might not fit
properly. This can cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and can damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-34.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping the fuel before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the clockwise
until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
Checking Things Under
the Hood
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle with this symbol
on it. It is located
inside the vehicle to
the left of the steering
column.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Lift the hood.
4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it will continue to
open to the full position. Before closing the hood,
be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Lower the
hood until the lifting force of the strut is reduced,
then release the hood to latch fully. Check to make
sure the hood is closed and repeat the process
if necessary.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release handle toward the driver
side of the vehicle.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
page 5-22.
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
page 5-23.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
F. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-30.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the location of the
When to Add Engine Oil
engine oil fill cap.
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add at least
one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
page 5-92.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has so
much oil that the oil level gets above the upper mark
that shows the proper operating range, the engine
could be damaged.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oils meeting these
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for three things:
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine
Oil to Use” for more information.
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers on
an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do
not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. See DIC
the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that
an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and at this time the system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained service people who will
perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly and
keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system
must be reset every time the oil is changed.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON
message being turned on, reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
After changing the engine oil and filter, the system must
be reset. To reset the oil life system:
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three
times within five seconds.
If the message is not displayed, the system is reset.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back
on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a
new filter is required.
1. Remove the spring clamps that hold the cover on.
2. Lift off the cover.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into the engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Align the filter correctly using the alignment tab.
5. Install the cover by guiding the tabs on the rim of
the top cover into the bottom hinges and turn the
cover down to close it.
6. The spring clips will engage easily, if the cover is
properly seated.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Cooling System
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
dealer/retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed
page 6-12.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
C. Pressure Cap
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
What to Use
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
{ CAUTION:
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core,
and other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at
or above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
the coolant recovery tank, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before this is done. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23 for more information.
{ CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and
it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do
not spill coolant on a hot engine.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark on the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you
may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to
the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about two or two and one-half turns.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will
allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
{ CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the FULL COLD mark. Wait about five minutes,
then check to see if the level is below the mark.
If the level is below the FULL COLD mark,
add additional coolant to bring the level up to the
mark. Repeat this procedure until the level remains
constant at the FULL COLD mark for at least
five minutes.
Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
more information on location.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank might be lower. If the level is lower than
the FULL COLD mark, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the FULL COLD mark.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has an indicator to warn of engine
overheating.
There is an engine coolant temperature warning light on
the vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
information.
{ CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no
sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
If you keep driving when your engine is overheated,
the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could
be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire because of being
driven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
• Stops after high-speed driving.
• Idles for long periods in traffic.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low, a
LOW WASHER FLUID message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are
needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the
time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
{ CAUTION:
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Battery
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the 12-volt battery black, negative (−) cable, the
one that is exposed. This helps keep the battery from
running down.
{ CAUTION:
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the 12-volt battery black, negative (−) cable
from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
This helps maintain the charge of the battery over an
extended period of time.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Remember to reconnect the battery when ready to drive
the vehicle.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Notice: The 36-volt hybrid battery system should
be serviced only by a qualified facility to avoid
battery system damage. See your dealer/retailer if
service is needed.
This vehicle has a standard 12-volt battery and a 36-volt
hybrid battery system.
Notice: If the vehicle is not driven for over two
months, the 36-volt hybrid battery can be
permanently damaged.
12-Volt Battery
When a new standard 12-volt battery is needed, see
your dealer/retailer for one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label.
The 36-volt battery is located behind the rear seat, in
the trunk. If the vehicle is stored for an extended period
of time, drive the vehicle every two months for about
half an hour to keep the 36-volt hybrid battery charged
and in good working condition.
36-Volt Battery System
If a new 36-volt hybrid battery system is needed, see
your dealer/retailer.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Jump Starting
If the battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the
parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the
jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission
in P (Park) or a manual transmission in N (Neutral)
before setting the parking brake.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by the warranty. Always turn off the radio
and other accessories when jump starting the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.
The negative (–) terminal is located under a
black tethered cap on the battery. See Engine
information on location. Flip the caps up to access
the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you don’t,
explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the caps over the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminals to their original positions.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (–) Terminal
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (–) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp
C. Backup Lamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
If a stoplamp or a taillamp needs to be replaced, see
your dealer/retailer.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace a sidemarker lamp, turn signal lamp, or a
back-up lamp:
6. Remove the wiring harness from the taillamp
assembly by lifting the release tab.
7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.
8. Pull the bulb from the socket.
2. Remove the convenience net.
3. Remove the wing nuts holding the trunk trim and
pull the trunk trim straight back.
9. Install a new bulb.
10. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall.
11. Reinstall the wiring harness and press down on the
release tab.
12. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and turn the three
wing nuts clockwise.
13. Reinstall the trunk trim and wing nuts.
4. Turn the three wing nuts counterclockwise that hold
the taillamp assembly counterclockwise.
5. Remove the taillamp assembly.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the new bulb in and turn it clockwise to install.
License Plate Lamp
5. Replace the license plate lamp by pushing it
through the fascia opening.
To replace the license plate lamp bulb:
6. Turn the two screws that hold the license plate
lamp clockwise to reinstall.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Bulb Number
921
License Plate Lamp and Rear
Sidemarker Lamp
168
Turn Signal Lamp
3156
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
1. Remove the license plate assembly by turning the
two screws counterclockwise.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Slide the blade forward.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
4. Turn the blade toward you and continue to slide
forward to remove.
5. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
Inspect the windshield wiper blades for wear or cracking.
To remove the wiper blade:
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
2. Push the release button.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your vehicle’s
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.
{ CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle’s tires have been damaged,
replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The example below shows a typical
passenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction and temperature resistance. For more
page 5-59.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-48.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 4-22.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
page 5-56.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
Check your tires once a month or more.
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
High-Speed Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
{ CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Set the cold tire inflation pressure to the maximum
inflation pressure shown on the tire’s sidewall, or 41 psi
(282 kPa), whichever is lower. The tire’s maximum
load and inflation pressure is molded on the tire’s
sidewall, in small letters, near the rim flange. When you
end high-speed driving return the tires to the cold
inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s
tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
additional information.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver
when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors
are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s
tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS turns on the low tire
pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can
be viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC
message to come on are:
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tire
sealant available through your dealer/retailer.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Your vehicle, when new, included a factory-installed Tire
Inflator Kit. This kit uses a GM approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants could damage
the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit for information regarding the inflator kit materials and
instructions.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
page 5-56.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match any
tire and wheel position, the matching process stops
and you need to start over.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at the
same time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the
TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel location. The
sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel locations, in
the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side
front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side
rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that
corner’s sensor is ready to be learned.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then all
the turn signals flash one time to confirm the sensor
identification code has been matched to the tire/
wheel position.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damage.
for more information.
7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound to
indicate the tire learning process is done. Turn
the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
more information.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn
mode, or if communication with the receiver
stops, or if the time limit has expired, turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF and start over
beginning with Step 2.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
page 4-22.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
When It Is Time for New Tires
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS, for mud
for additional information.
{ CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires)
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
for information on proper tire rotation.
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the
same size, load range, speed rating, and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See
{ CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use Saturn
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a
Saturn certified technician.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to
rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control, and
stability control, the performance of these systems can be
affected.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
{ WARNING:
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
{ WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Temperature – A, B, C
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
{ CAUTION:
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It
could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new Saturn
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to
the body and chassis.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel
nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and
even come off. This could lead to a crash. Be sure
to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new Saturn original
equipment wheel nuts.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads of
the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel nuts might
come loose and the wheel could fall off, causing a
crash.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new Saturn original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could
cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it is contacting the
vehicle, and do not spin the vehicle’s wheels. If
you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place and stopping. Then
do this:
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit. See
There is no spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and
no place to store a tire.
2. Park your vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in P (Park). See Shifting Into Park
on page 2-30.
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See
more likely to leak out slowly. But, if you should
ever have a blow out, here are a few tips about what to
expect and what to do:
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
damaged sidewalls, or has a puncture larger than a
1
⁄4
inch (6 mm), the tire is too severely damaged for the
tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective. See
1
If the tire has a puncture less than a ⁄4 inch (6 mm) in
A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much like
a skid and may require the same correction you
would use in a skid. In any rear blow out, remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way you want the vehicle
to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can
still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road
if possible.
the tread area of the tire, see Tire Sealant and
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger compartment of
the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike someone.
Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,
there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not be a place to
store a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor can be used to
1
temporarily seal punctures up to ⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate
an under inflated tire.
{ CAUTION:
Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit
instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended
pressure. Do not exceed the recommended
pressure.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is too
severely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit
page 7-7.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions.
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
label adhered to the sealant canister.
The kit includes:
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before
its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
A. Air Compressor
B. Tire Sealant
Canister
E. Pressure Gage
F. Air Only Hose
(Black)
C. Power Plug
D. On/Off Button
G. Sealant/Air Hose
(Clear)
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-64. Do not remove any objects that have
penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
Make sure the on/off button (D) is in the off (O)
position.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the power
plug (C).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during
cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment
for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit
cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating
hose from the tire valve. See Roadside Assistance
8. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject sealant and air into
the tire.
The pressure gage (E) will initially show a high
pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant
into the tire. Once the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop
and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only.
10. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air
until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire, therefore, Steps 11 through
17 must be done immediately after Step 10.
9. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gage (E). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
11. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
The pressure gage (E) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turn
the compressor off to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may be turned on/off until
the correct pressure is reached.
12. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise to
remove it from the tire valve stem.
13. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
14. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the power
plug (C) back in their original location.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
maximum speed label
from the sealant
If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi
(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation pressure,
stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
canister (B) and place
it in a highly visible
location.
19. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire or vehicle.
20. Dispose of the used sealant canister (B) and
sealant/air hose (F) assembly at a local
dealer/retailer or in accordance with local state
codes and practices.
The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the damaged tire is repaired
or replaced.
21. Replace it with a new canister available from your
dealer/retailer.
16. Return the equipment to its original storage location
in the vehicle.
22. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer/retailer within a 100 miles (161 km) of driving
to have the tire repaired or replaced.
17. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
18. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to
Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B) by pulling up on the lever.
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
3. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B).
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
4. Remove the power plug (C) from the air
compressor (A).
5. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
6. Remove the tire valve stem cap by turning it
counterclockwise.
7. Attach the air only hose (F) onto the tire valve stem
and press the lever down to secure it.
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-64.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
The pressure gage (E) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turn
the compressor off to get an accurate reading.
The compressor may be turned on/off until
the correct pressure is reached.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
12. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
13. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
14. Disconnect the air only hose (F) from the tire valve
stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
10. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the
compressor on.
15. Replace the air only hose (F) and the power
plug (C) back in its original location.
The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.
11. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gage (E). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
16. Place the equipment in the original storage location
in the vehicle.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
4. Turn the sealant canister (B) so the inflator filling
hose is aligned with the slot in the compressor.
1. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B) by pulling up on the lever.
5. Lift the sealant canister (B) from the compressor
and replace with a new sealant canister. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
2. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B).
3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) from the
compressor (A).
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To install a new sealant canister:
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Storage
1. Align the sealant/air hose (F) with the slot in the air
compressor.
The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the
trunk.
2. Push the sealant canister (B) down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (F) around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
2. Lift the cover.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose (F) onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.
3. Turn the retainer clockwise and remove the tire
sealant and compressor kit.
To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse the
steps.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause
stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To clean:
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use
only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
Fabric/Carpet
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For
any soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or
club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much
of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-77.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever
possible.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Use
only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Tires
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
your vehicle’s engine code.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label
has the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Electrical System
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Intermediate Voltage Devices and
Wiring
{ CAUTION:
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
Exposure to intermediate voltage can cause shock
and burns. The intermediate voltage systems in
the vehicle can only be serviced by technicians
with special training.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Intermediate voltage devices are identified by
labels. Do not remove, open, take apart, or modify
these devices. Intermediate voltage cable or wiring
has blue covering. Do not probe, tamper with, cut,
or modify intermediate voltage cable or wiring.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem, have it fixed.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Fuses
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible links. This greatly reduces the chance of
damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one in the
center of the instrument panel, one in the engine
compartment and one in the trunk.
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger side of the vehicle, on the lower portion of
the instrument panel near the floor.
There is a fuse puller located on the instrument panel
fuse block. It can be used to easily remove fuses
from the fuse block.
Remove the panel cover to access the fuse block, then
remove the fuse block cover to access the fuses.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle might not have all the fuses and features listed.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
POWER
WIPER SW
IGN SENSOR Ignition Switch
STRG WHL
ILLUM
NOT
INSTALLED
RADIO
INTERIOR
LIGHTS
NOT
INSTALLED
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Power Mirrors
MIRRORS
EPS
RUN/CRANK
HVAC
BLOWER HIGH Blower - High Speed Relay
CLUSTER/
THEFT
ONSTAR
NOT
INSTALLED
Electronic Power Steering
Cruise Control Switch, Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator
Steering Wheel Illumination
Not Used
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Audio System
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Cluster, Theft
Deterrent System
OnStar®
Not Used
Not Used
POWER
WINDOWS
Power Windows
AIRBAG (IGN) Airbag (Ignition)
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
HVAC
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Control (Ignition)
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Blower Switch
HVAC
Control Diagnostic Link Connector
(Battery)
CTRL (IGN)
CTRL (BATT)
HVAC
BLOWER
PEDAL
Not Used
DOOR LOCK Door Locks
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Fuses
ROOF/HEAT
SEAT
NOT
INSTALLED
NOT
INSTALLED
AIRBAG
(BATT)
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
Usage
Sunroof, Heated Seat
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the engine compartment, near the battery.
Not Used
The vehicle might not have all the fuses and features
listed.
Not Used
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Airbag (Battery)
Spare Fuse Holder
Spare Fuse Holder
Spare Fuse Holder
Spare Fuse Holder
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
Air Conditioner Clutch
Electronic Throttle Control
Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) IGN
Transmission, Transmission Control
Module Ignition 1
Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) Pumps
4
5
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
26
41
Usage
6
7
8
Emission
Starter
Left Headlamp Low-Beam
Horn
Electric Power Steering
Transmission Control Module
Battery
42
9
Right Headlamp Low-Beam
Left Headlamp High-Beam
Right Headlamp High-Beam
Engine Control Module BATT
Windshield Wiper
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
(IGN 1)
Engine Control Module (IGN 1)
Cooling Fan 1
43
44
46
47
50
51
52
54
55
Ignition Module
11
12
13
14
Injectors
Daytime Running Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stoplamps
Driver Power Window
Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) BATT
Transmission Pump Motor
Battery Voltage Sense
Antilock Brake System (Battery)
15
16
17
18
Cooling Fan 2
Run Relay, Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning Blower
Body Control Module 1
Body Control Module Run/Crank
Rear Electrical Center 1
Rear Electrical Center 2
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Body Control Module 2
19
Relays
28
29
30
31
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Cooling Fan 2
Starter
Run/Crank, Ignition
Powertrain
20
21
22
23
24
25
32
33
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Compartment Fuse Block
Relays
34
35
Usage
Air Conditioning Clutch
High-Beam Headlamp
Horn
37
38
39
40
48
Low-Beam Headlamp
Windshield Wiper 1
Windshield Wiper 2
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Stoplamps
49
53
Transmission Pump Motor
Diodes
Usage
27
Wiper
The rear compartment fuse block is located in the trunk
of the vehicle. Access the fuse block through the
trunk panel on the driver side of the rear cargo area.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Passenger Seat Controls
Driver Seat Controls
Not Used
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
5
Emission 2, Canister Vent Solenoid
Park Lamps, Instrument Panel
Dimming
6
7
Not Used
Not Used
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
8
Usage
Fuses
24
25
Usage
Usage
Rear Window Defogger
Park Lamps
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Heated Mirrors
Fuel Pump
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Sunroof Controls
Not Used
Relays
26
27
28
Not Used
Audio Amplifier
Heated Seat Controls
Not Used
29
Not Used
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System, XM™ Satellite
Radio, UGDO
Back-up Lamps
Not Used
Not Used
Auxiliary Power Outlets
Not Used
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Back-up Lamps
Not Used
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Not Used
Trunk Release
Fuel Pump
Cargo Lamp
37
Trunk Release
Rear Defog
38 (Diode)
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
8.1 qt
7.0 qt
7.7 L
6.6 L
Transmission (Bottom Pan Removal)
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
5.0 qt
4.7 L
16.3 gal
100 lb ft
61.7 L
140 Y
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4
5
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times a
week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep this vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep the
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-6.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
{ CAUTION:
To purchase service information, see Service
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily
be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following
for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that the first service be Maintenance I,
the second service be Maintenance II, and then
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II might be
required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message displays in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), service is required for
the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message
displays within 10 months since the vehicle was
purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message displays
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
Inspect underbody 36-volt battery
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
system cable. See footnote (l).
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service only).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug
wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
•
•
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid hinges
and latches. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect electric power steering cables
for proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
page 5-78 for more information.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
If the vehicle is not used under any of these conditions,
the fluid and filter do not require changing.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
(k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
(l) Visually inspect underbody 36-volt battery system
cable for damage. Replace cable if necessary.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
{ CAUTION:
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
At Least Once a Month
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
Inspect the vehicle’s tires for wear and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. See Inflation - Tire
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{ CAUTION:
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
on page 2-29.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission
in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
{ CAUTION:
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Usage
Windshield
Washer
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Fluid/Lubricant
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Check the sealant expiration date printed on the
instruction label of the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
at least once a year. See your dealer/retailer for a
replacement canister.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and
Release Pawl
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 109435474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
or Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Hood and
Door Hinges
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Engine Oil
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-23.
Engine
Coolant
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
Part Numbers
22676970
ACDelco Part Numbers
A1627C
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
12605566
12598004
PF457G
41-103
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 23.6 in (60.0 cm)
Passenger Side – 21.0 in (53.0 cm)
25800624
25800623
—
—
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Drive Belt Routing
The engine drive belt on this hybrid vehicle is under a
higher tension than the engine drive belt on a non-hybrid
vehicle and requires the use of a special kind of tool
to service. See your dealer/retailer for service.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and
the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
call the Saturn Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance Center
team member will handle your call and assist in
providing product and warranty information, the nearest
retailer location, roadside assistance, brochures,
literature and discuss any concerns you may have.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committed
to providing our customers with unparalleled service,
before, during, and after the purchase of a Saturn
vehicle, for total customer satisfaction. We call this the
Saturn Difference. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
are resolved by the retailer’s sales or service
departments. If, for any reason, your ownership
experience falls below your expectations, we suggest
you take the following action:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This 17-digit
number can be found on the vehicle registration
or title, on the upper driver side corner of the
instrument panel, or on your roadside assistance
key card.
• The name of your selling and servicing retail facility.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer Assistance
Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has
the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns.
Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.
When contacting Saturn, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first.
STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance,
in the U.S., contact the Saturn Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada,
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and its
retailers are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, Saturn
and its retailers offer the additional assistance of a
neutral party through our voluntary participation in a
mediation/arbitration program called Better Business
Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using the
toll-free telephone number or by writing them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Dr.bbb.org/goauto
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. This program is available at no cost
to you, our customer.
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle
age, mileage and other factors. Saturn Corporation
reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case is generally heard within 40 days. If you do not
agree with the decision given in your case, you can
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may
call the Saturn Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-1999, or you may write to:
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have
been addressed after following the procedure outlined in
Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint to the
final decision, should be completed in approximately
70 days. We believe our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it
is informal, quick, and free of charge.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/saturn
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Online service and maintenance records
• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide
• Exclusive privileges and offers
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred
GM dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• Recall notices for your specific vehicle
• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Saturn − www.saturn.com
Saturn Merchandise — www.saturncollection.com
Help Center — www.saturn.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
• Contact Us
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, write to:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
To assist owners who have hearing difficulties, Saturn
has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices
for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer
Assistance Center.
GMcanada.com
1-800-263-1999
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Any hearing or speech-impaired customer who has
access to a TDD or to a conventional Text Telephone
(TTY) can communicate with Saturn by dialing
1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada may dial
1-800-263-3830.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Customer Assistance Offices
Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a customer wishes to write
to Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle such as hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
Mail Code 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
1-800-553-6000
1-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
In Canada, customers may call the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in
Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.
• Description of the problem
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-553-6000;
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In
Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission
from the owner is not covered.
(Text Telephone (TTY): 1-800-889-2438).
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Saturn and General Motors of Canada
Limited reserve the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or
driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or
the same type of claim is made many times.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Services Provided
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway:
Tow to the nearest Saturn retailer for warranty
service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot
be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle
is stuck in sand, mud, or snow.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided
through this service.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the most scenic
route. There is a limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure,
incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the
5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain
warranty period. Items considered are hotel, meals,
and rental car.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed
receipts, and a copy of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive payment.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor
for repairs not covered by the warranty are
the owner responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating retailers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada), extended powertrain, and hybrid
specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts. See your retailer for
information regarding the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Saturn helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your retailer can offer you one of the following:
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your retailer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Retailers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the retailer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the retailer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by Saturn for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to
ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every retailer. Please contact your retailer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate retailer personnel.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Saturn reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change
or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant
to the terms and conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repair Facility
If a Crash Occurs
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are
uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
Insuring Your Vehicle
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you can
get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not
pay the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it could
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it could
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your retailer or Saturn
Corporation.
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify Saturn.
Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to Safercar.gov; or write to:
In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or write:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from Safercar.gov.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, information relating to product service
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your
Saturn retailer.
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Bulletins
Service Manuals
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors product
performance in the field. We then prepare bulletins for
servicing our products better. You can get these
bulletins, too.
A variety of publications are available to you. Saturn
service manuals are written for trained technicians, and
in some cases, specialized tools and equipment are
necessary to complete certain repairs. However, the
manuals are available to owners who either have the
training, or wish to gain a greater understanding of the
technical aspect of their Saturn.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the
proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe
costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs
which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid
future costly repairs.
For additional publications information or to order
publications in the United States, call toll free
1-800-2-SATURN or visit Saturn-publications.com to
order on-line.
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or
unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker
way to fix your vehicle. They can help a technician
service your vehicle better.
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by
calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.
Owner Publications
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small
number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified
technician may have to determine if a specific bulletin
applies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,
call Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
saturn-publications.com to order online.
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as
described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states
and the District of Columbia, and only for cars and light
trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) less
than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of individual
bulletins are also at your participating Saturn retailer.
You can ask to see them.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
Your Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor
and control engine and transmission performance,
to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash and, if so equipped,
to provide antilock braking to help the driver control
the vehicle. These modules may store data to help
your dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle.
Some modules may also store data about how
you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules
may also retain the owner’s personal preferences,
such as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
temperature settings.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Saturn will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if
the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of Saturn’s defense of
litigation through the discovery process; or, as required
by law. Data that Saturn collects or receives may
also be used for Saturn research needs or may be made
available to others for research purposes, where a
need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific
vehicle or vehicle owner.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in Saturn vehicles does not
use or record personal information or link with any other
Saturn system containing personal information.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
manual for more information.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Door (cont.)
Electrical System (cont.)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps Off in Park .................................... 3-14
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
Locks (cont.)
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-30
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power (cont.)
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theft-Deterrent Systems (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-16
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
